1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings For Sale

Commercial shops, industrial warehouses, farm buildings and specialty structures from $14,500. Cold-formed galvanized steel frames ship with PE-stamped engineered drawings tailored to your local wind speed and snow load requirements. Every Steel and Stud order includes free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors or multi-bay layouts.

$14,500
STARTING PRICE
13+
BUILDING TYPES
200ft
MAX CLEAR SPAN
48
STATES COVERED
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 601–640 of 2788 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Matte black steel garage with two roll-up bays, a sports car and black pickup parked outside

24×70 Pickleball or Batting Cage Court

1,680 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×70 steel building delivers 1,680 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court | Steel and Stud — From $40,900
12
24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$46,650$40,900SAVE $5,750
or $852/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×70Pickleball Batting Cage Court

24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Pickleball Batting Cage Court·Size24×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$40,900$46,650Save $5,750
or as low as $852/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×70
24×70
this size
$40,900
24×75
longer
$43,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,680 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,680 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X70-PICKLEBALL-BATTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-court sports building.

24 feet wide × 70 feet long. Clear-span framing keeps the floor post-free. The 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

Court / training floorSIDELINE + BENCH LANEGear + entry vestibule24′ × 70′ · 1,680 sq ft · single-court sports building

Court / training floor · Sideline + bench lane · Gear + entry vestibule

Court / training floor at the front, sideline + bench lane in the middle, gear + entry vestibule at the rear. Capacity: 1 court or open training floor.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sport-court tiles, ceiling nets, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pickleball Batting Cage Court.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,680 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pickleball Batting Cage Court spec sheet.

Width24'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,680 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pickleball Batting Cage Court.

DAILY USEEveryday pickleball batting cage court
Everyday pickleball batting cage court
1,680 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pickleball batting cage court.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpickleball batting cage court + seasonal storage
pickleball batting cage court + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court — what makes it different.

1,680sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$852/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×70 pickleball batting cage court is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $852/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×70?

1,680 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 70′ footprint with 1,680 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $13,440–$20,160 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pickleball Batting Cage Court shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pickleball Batting Cage Court also viewed:

🏢 24×70

Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay

24×70 five-car garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 24×70

Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout

24×70 auto repair shop — 3-bay layout configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout →
🌾 24×70

Equipment Storage Barn

24×70 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 24×70

Fabrication Shop

24×70 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 24×70

Metal Barndominium Shell

24×70 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🎯 24×70

RV Garage with Living Quarters

24×70 rv garage with living quarters configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →
🏢 24×70

Fleet Garage for Contractors

24×70 fleet garage for contractors configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Contractors →
🌾 24×70

Horse Barn with Center Aisle

24×70 horse barn with center aisle configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Center Aisle →
🏭 24×70

Warehouse for Inventory Storage

24×70 warehouse for inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse for Inventory Storage →
🏢 24×70

Self-Storage Building

24×70 self-storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Building →
🎯 24×70

Indoor Sports & Training Facility

24×70 indoor sports & training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports & Training Facility →
🏛️ 24×70

Community Hall or Event Space

24×70 community hall or event space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community Hall or Event Space →
🏢 24×70

Office

24×70 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 24×70

RV Motorhome Storage

24×70 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 24×70

Hobby Space

24×70 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 24×70

4 Car Garage

24×70 4 car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 4 Car Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pickleball Batting Cage Court questions, answered.

How much does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court cost?

A 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud starts at $40,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $852/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pickleball batting cage court ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court?

Almost always for 1,680+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pickleball batting cage court different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $852/month on a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court.

What warranty comes with the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×70 pickleball batting cage court typically adds $13,440–$20,160 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pickleball Batting Cage Court quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$40,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte black steel garage with two roll-up bays, a sports car and black pickup parked outside

24×70 Pickleball or Batting Cage Court

1,680 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×70 steel building delivers 1,680 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court | Steel and Stud — From $40,900
12
24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$46,650$40,900SAVE $5,750
or $852/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×70Pickleball Batting Cage Court

24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Pickleball Batting Cage Court·Size24×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$40,900$46,650Save $5,750
or as low as $852/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×70
24×70
this size
$40,900
24×75
longer
$43,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,680 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,680 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X70-PICKLEBALL-BATTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-court sports building.

24 feet wide × 70 feet long. Clear-span framing keeps the floor post-free. The 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

Court / training floorSIDELINE + BENCH LANEGear + entry vestibule24′ × 70′ · 1,680 sq ft · single-court sports building

Court / training floor · Sideline + bench lane · Gear + entry vestibule

Court / training floor at the front, sideline + bench lane in the middle, gear + entry vestibule at the rear. Capacity: 1 court or open training floor.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sport-court tiles, ceiling nets, insulated envelope.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pickleball Batting Cage Court.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,680 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pickleball Batting Cage Court spec sheet.

Width24'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,680 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pickleball Batting Cage Court.

DAILY USEEveryday pickleball batting cage court
Everyday pickleball batting cage court
1,680 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pickleball batting cage court.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpickleball batting cage court + seasonal storage
pickleball batting cage court + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court — what makes it different.

1,680sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$852/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×70 pickleball batting cage court is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $852/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×70?

1,680 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 70′ footprint with 1,680 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $13,440–$20,160 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pickleball Batting Cage Court shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×70 Pickleball Batting Cage Court

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pickleball Batting Cage Court also viewed:

🏢 24×70

Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay

24×70 five-car garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 24×70

Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout

24×70 auto repair shop — 3-bay layout configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout →
🌾 24×70

Equipment Storage Barn

24×70 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 24×70

Fabrication Shop

24×70 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 24×70

Metal Barndominium Shell

24×70 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🎯 24×70

RV Garage with Living Quarters

24×70 rv garage with living quarters configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →
🏢 24×70

Fleet Garage for Contractors

24×70 fleet garage for contractors configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Contractors →
🌾 24×70

Horse Barn with Center Aisle

24×70 horse barn with center aisle configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Center Aisle →
🏭 24×70

Warehouse for Inventory Storage

24×70 warehouse for inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse for Inventory Storage →
🏢 24×70

Self-Storage Building

24×70 self-storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Building →
🎯 24×70

Indoor Sports & Training Facility

24×70 indoor sports & training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports & Training Facility →
🏛️ 24×70

Community Hall or Event Space

24×70 community hall or event space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community Hall or Event Space →
🏢 24×70

Office

24×70 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 24×70

RV Motorhome Storage

24×70 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 24×70

Hobby Space

24×70 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 24×70

4 Car Garage

24×70 4 car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 4 Car Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pickleball Batting Cage Court questions, answered.

How much does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court cost?

A 24×70 pickleball batting cage court from Steel and Stud starts at $40,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $852/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pickleball batting cage court ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court?

Almost always for 1,680+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pickleball batting cage court different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $852/month on a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court.

What warranty comes with the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×70 pickleball batting cage court in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×70 pickleball batting cage court add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×70 pickleball batting cage court typically adds $13,440–$20,160 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pickleball Batting Cage Court quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$40,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

24′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×35 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×35 Garage Plus Pool House | Steel and Stud — From $20,450
12
24×35 Garage Plus Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,300$20,450SAVE $2,850
or $426/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×35Garage Plus Pool House

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud puts 840 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Garage Plus Pool House·Size24×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,450$23,300Save $2,850
or as low as $426/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×35
24×35
this size
$20,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • 840 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X35-GARAGE-PLUS-POOLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

24 feet wide × 35 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud puts 840 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools24′ × 35′ · 840 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage Plus Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage Plus Pool House spec sheet.

Width24'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage Plus Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday garage plus pool house
Everyday garage plus pool house
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage plus pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage plus pool house + seasonal storage
garage plus pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House — what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$426/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×35 garage plus pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $426/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×35?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 35′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage Plus Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage Plus Pool House also viewed:

🏡 24×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

24×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 24×35

Workshop with Drive-Through Bay

24×35 workshop with drive-through bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop with Drive-Through Bay →
🎯 24×35

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

24×35 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🌾 24×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

24×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →
🏡 24×35

Man Cave with Roll-Up Garage Door

24×35 man cave with roll-up garage door configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave with Roll-Up Garage Door →
🌾 24×35

Run-In Horse Barn

24×35 run-in horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Run-In Horse Barn →
🏢 24×35

Contractor's Detached Shop

24×35 contractor's detached shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor's Detached Shop →
🎯 24×35

Boat & Trailer Storage

24×35 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 24×35

She Shed with Loft Studio

24×35 she shed with loft studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize She Shed with Loft Studio →
🏢 24×35

Small Retail or Storefront

24×35 small retail or storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Retail or Storefront →
🏭 24×35

Welding & Fabrication Shop

24×35 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage Plus Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 24×35 garage plus pool house cost?

A 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $20,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $426/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×35 garage plus pool house price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud garage plus pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×35 garage plus pool house?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage plus pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×35 garage plus pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×35 garage plus pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×35 garage plus pool house without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $426/month on a 24×35 garage plus pool house.

What warranty comes with the 24×35 garage plus pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×35 garage plus pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×35 garage plus pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×35 garage plus pool house typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage Plus Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit pool house at twilight with covered porch and lit sliding glass doors

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

24′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×35 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×35 Garage Plus Pool House | Steel and Stud — From $20,450
12
24×35 Garage Plus Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,300$20,450SAVE $2,850
or $426/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×35Garage Plus Pool House

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud puts 840 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Garage Plus Pool House·Size24×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,450$23,300Save $2,850
or as low as $426/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×35
24×35
this size
$20,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 840 sq ft enclosed
  • 840 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X35-GARAGE-PLUS-POOLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

24 feet wide × 35 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud puts 840 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools24′ × 35′ · 840 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage Plus Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
840 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage Plus Pool House spec sheet.

Width24'
Length35' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space840 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage Plus Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday garage plus pool house
Everyday garage plus pool house
840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage plus pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage plus pool house + seasonal storage
garage plus pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×35 Garage Plus Pool House — what makes it different.

840sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$426/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×35 garage plus pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $426/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×35?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 35′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage Plus Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×35 Garage Plus Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage Plus Pool House also viewed:

🏡 24×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

24×35 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 24×35

Workshop with Drive-Through Bay

24×35 workshop with drive-through bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop with Drive-Through Bay →
🎯 24×35

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

24×35 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🌾 24×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

24×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →
🏡 24×35

Man Cave with Roll-Up Garage Door

24×35 man cave with roll-up garage door configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave with Roll-Up Garage Door →
🌾 24×35

Run-In Horse Barn

24×35 run-in horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Run-In Horse Barn →
🏢 24×35

Contractor's Detached Shop

24×35 contractor's detached shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor's Detached Shop →
🎯 24×35

Boat & Trailer Storage

24×35 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 24×35

She Shed with Loft Studio

24×35 she shed with loft studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize She Shed with Loft Studio →
🏢 24×35

Small Retail or Storefront

24×35 small retail or storefront configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Retail or Storefront →
🏭 24×35

Welding & Fabrication Shop

24×35 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage Plus Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 24×35 garage plus pool house cost?

A 24×35 garage plus pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $20,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $426/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×35 garage plus pool house price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud garage plus pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×35 garage plus pool house?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage plus pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×35 garage plus pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×35 garage plus pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×35 garage plus pool house without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $426/month on a 24×35 garage plus pool house.

What warranty comes with the 24×35 garage plus pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×35 garage plus pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×35 garage plus pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×35 garage plus pool house typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage Plus Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and concrete apron under a vivid sunset

28×40×12 2-Car Garage with Workshop Metal Building Kit

1,120 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

28′ x 40′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×40 steel building delivers 1,120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner | Steel and Stud — From $17,750
12
28×40 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,250$17,750SAVE $2,500
or $370/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings28×403 Car Garage Workshop Corner

28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner, built for daily backyard use.

The 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:3 Car Garage Workshop Corner·Size28×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,750$20,250Save $2,500
or as low as $370/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×40
28×40
this size
$17,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,120 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,120 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X40-3-CAR-GARAGE-WORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

28 feet wide × 40 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay28′ × 40′ · 1,120 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×40 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×40×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3 Car Garage Workshop Corner spec sheet.

Width28'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner.

DAILY USEEveryday 3 car garage workshop corner
Everyday 3 car garage workshop corner
1,120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 3 car garage workshop corner.
STORAGE OVERFLOW3 car garage workshop corner + seasonal storage
3 car garage workshop corner + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner — what makes it different.

1,120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$370/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $370/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×40×12?

1,120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 40′ footprint with 1,120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,960–$13,440 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×40×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 28×40×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner also viewed:

🏡 28×40×12

Barndominium Shell

28×40×12 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🎯 28×40×12

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

28×40×12 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🏢 28×40×12

Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay

28×40×12 contractor workshop & equipment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay →
🌾 28×40×12

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

28×40×12 hay barn & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →
🏡 28×40×12

Garage with Loft Apartment

28×40×12 garage with loft apartment configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage with Loft Apartment →
🏢 28×40×12

Auto Repair Shop

28×40×12 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 28×40×12

Horse Barn with Tack Room

28×40×12 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🎯 28×40×12

Man Cave & Game Room

28×40×12 man cave & game room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Game Room →
🏭 28×40×12

Welding & Fabrication Shop

28×40×12 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
🏡 28×40×12

Detached Garage & She Shed Combo

28×40×12 detached garage & she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage & She Shed Combo →
🏢 28×40×12

Boat & Trailer Storage Building

28×40×12 boat & trailer storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

3 Car Garage Workshop Corner questions, answered.

How much does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner cost?

A 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud starts at $17,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $370/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud 3 car garage workshop corner ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner?

Almost always for 1,120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 3 car garage workshop corner different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $370/month on a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner.

What warranty comes with the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner typically adds $8,960–$13,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and concrete apron under a vivid sunset

28×40×12 2-Car Garage with Workshop Metal Building Kit

1,120 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

28′ x 40′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×40 steel building delivers 1,120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner | Steel and Stud — From $17,750
12
28×40 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,250$17,750SAVE $2,500
or $370/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings28×403 Car Garage Workshop Corner

28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner, built for daily backyard use.

The 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:3 Car Garage Workshop Corner·Size28×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,750$20,250Save $2,500
or as low as $370/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×40
28×40
this size
$17,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,120 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,120 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X40-3-CAR-GARAGE-WORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

28 feet wide × 40 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. The 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay28′ × 40′ · 1,120 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×40 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×40×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3 Car Garage Workshop Corner spec sheet.

Width28'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner.

DAILY USEEveryday 3 car garage workshop corner
Everyday 3 car garage workshop corner
1,120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a 3 car garage workshop corner.
STORAGE OVERFLOW3 car garage workshop corner + seasonal storage
3 car garage workshop corner + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner — what makes it different.

1,120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$370/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $370/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×40×12?

1,120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 40′ footprint with 1,120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,960–$13,440 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×40×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 28×40×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×40×12 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner also viewed:

🏡 28×40×12

Barndominium Shell

28×40×12 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🎯 28×40×12

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

28×40×12 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🏢 28×40×12

Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay

28×40×12 contractor workshop & equipment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay →
🌾 28×40×12

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

28×40×12 hay barn & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →
🏡 28×40×12

Garage with Loft Apartment

28×40×12 garage with loft apartment configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage with Loft Apartment →
🏢 28×40×12

Auto Repair Shop

28×40×12 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 28×40×12

Horse Barn with Tack Room

28×40×12 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🎯 28×40×12

Man Cave & Game Room

28×40×12 man cave & game room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Game Room →
🏭 28×40×12

Welding & Fabrication Shop

28×40×12 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
🏡 28×40×12

Detached Garage & She Shed Combo

28×40×12 detached garage & she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage & She Shed Combo →
🏢 28×40×12

Boat & Trailer Storage Building

28×40×12 boat & trailer storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

3 Car Garage Workshop Corner questions, answered.

How much does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner cost?

A 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner from Steel and Stud starts at $17,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $370/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud 3 car garage workshop corner ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner?

Almost always for 1,120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud 3 car garage workshop corner different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $370/month on a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner.

What warranty comes with the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×40×12 3 car garage workshop corner typically adds $8,960–$13,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your 3 Car Garage Workshop Corner quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open bay showing workbench, tools and shelving in a backyard

18×28 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

504 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 28′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×28 steel building delivers 504 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage | Steel and Stud — From $8,550
12
18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×28Tractor Shed Implement Storage

18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Tractor Shed Implement Storage·Size18×28·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×28
18×28
this size
$8,550
18×35
longer
$10,700
24×28
wider
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 504 sq ft enclosed
  • 504 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X28-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

18 feet wide × 28 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall18′ × 28′ · 504 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
504 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×28 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18'
Length28' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space504 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed implement storage
Everyday tractor shed implement storage
504 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage — what makes it different.

504sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×28 tractor shed implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×28?

504 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 28′ footprint with 504 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,032–$6,048 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×28 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×28 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×28

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×28 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×28

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×28 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×28

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×28 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×28

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×28 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×28

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×28 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🎯 18×28

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×28 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →
🏢 18×28

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×28 small business inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →
🏢 18×28

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×28 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×28

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×28 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×28

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×28 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×28

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×28 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage cost?

A 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tractor shed implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage?

Almost always for 504+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×28 tractor shed implement storage typically adds $4,032–$6,048 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with open bay showing workbench, tools and shelving in a backyard

18×28 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

504 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 28′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×28 steel building delivers 504 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage | Steel and Stud — From $8,550
12
18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×28Tractor Shed Implement Storage

18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Tractor Shed Implement Storage·Size18×28·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×28
18×28
this size
$8,550
18×35
longer
$10,700
24×28
wider
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 504 sq ft enclosed
  • 504 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X28-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

18 feet wide × 28 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall18′ × 28′ · 504 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
504 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×28 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18'
Length28' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space504 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed implement storage
Everyday tractor shed implement storage
504 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage — what makes it different.

504sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×28 tractor shed implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×28?

504 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 28′ footprint with 504 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,032–$6,048 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×28 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×28 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×28 Tractor Shed Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×28

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×28 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×28

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×28 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×28

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×28 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×28

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×28 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×28

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×28 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🎯 18×28

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×28 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →
🏢 18×28

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×28 small business inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →
🏢 18×28

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×28 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×28

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×28 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×28

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×28 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×28

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×28 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage cost?

A 18×28 tractor shed implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tractor shed implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage?

Almost always for 504+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×28 tractor shed implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×28 tractor shed implement storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×28 tractor shed implement storage typically adds $4,032–$6,048 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal carport with gable roof sheltering a pickup truck near a mountain lake

30×46 Contractor Shop and Equipment Bay

1,380 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×46 steel building delivers 1,380 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay | Steel and Stud — From $21,900
12
30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,950$21,900SAVE $3,050
or $456/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×46Contractor Shop Equipment Bay

30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud puts 1,380 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Shop Equipment Bay·Size30×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,900$24,950Save $3,050
or as low as $456/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×46
30×45
smaller
$21,400
30×46
this size
$21,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,380 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,380 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X46-CONTRACTOR-SHOP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

30 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud puts 1,380 sq ft to work.

2 drive-in baysIMPLEMENT + ATTACHMENT ROWSWorkbench + parts wall30′ × 46′ · 1,380 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

2 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

2 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 2 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop Equipment Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,380 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop Equipment Bay spec sheet.

Width30'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,380 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop Equipment Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop equipment bay
Everyday contractor shop equipment bay
1,380 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop equipment bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop equipment bay + seasonal storage
contractor shop equipment bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay — what makes it different.

1,380sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$456/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $456/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×46?

1,380 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 46′ footprint with 1,380 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,040–$16,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop Equipment Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop Equipment Bay also viewed:

🏡 30×46

Triple-Wide Garage

30×46 triple-wide garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Triple-Wide Garage →
🏡 30×46

RV Garage with Workshop Bay

30×46 rv garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 30×46

Tradesperson Service Bay

30×46 tradesperson service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Service Bay →
🌾 30×46

Equipment & Hay Storage

30×46 equipment & hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Storage →
🎯 30×46

Man Cave / She Shed Hybrid

30×46 man cave / she shed hybrid configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed Hybrid →
🏢 30×46

Auto Repair Shop

30×46 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 30×46

Horse Barn with Tack Room

30×46 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🏭 30×46

Fabrication or Welding Shop

30×46 fabrication or welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication or Welding Shop →
🏡 30×46

Barndominium Shell

30×46 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 30×46

Mini-Storage / Multi-Bay Unit

30×46 mini-storage / multi-bay unit configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage / Multi-Bay Unit →
🎯 30×46

Boat & Toy Storage

30×46 boat & toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Toy Storage →
🏛️ 30×46

Church or Community Storage

30×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop Equipment Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay cost?

A 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud starts at $21,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $456/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor shop equipment bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay?

Almost always for 1,380+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop equipment bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $456/month on a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay.

What warranty comes with the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay typically adds $11,040–$16,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop Equipment Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal carport with gable roof sheltering a pickup truck near a mountain lake

30×46 Contractor Shop and Equipment Bay

1,380 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

30′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×46 steel building delivers 1,380 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay | Steel and Stud — From $21,900
12
30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,950$21,900SAVE $3,050
or $456/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×46Contractor Shop Equipment Bay

30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay, built for daily backyard use.

The 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud puts 1,380 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Shop Equipment Bay·Size30×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,900$24,950Save $3,050
or as low as $456/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×46
30×45
smaller
$21,400
30×46
this size
$21,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,380 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,380 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X46-CONTRACTOR-SHOP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

30 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. The 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud puts 1,380 sq ft to work.

2 drive-in baysIMPLEMENT + ATTACHMENT ROWSWorkbench + parts wall30′ × 46′ · 1,380 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

2 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

2 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 2 machines under roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop Equipment Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,380 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop Equipment Bay spec sheet.

Width30'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,380 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop Equipment Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop equipment bay
Everyday contractor shop equipment bay
1,380 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop equipment bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop equipment bay + seasonal storage
contractor shop equipment bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay — what makes it different.

1,380sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$456/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $456/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×46?

1,380 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 46′ footprint with 1,380 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,040–$16,560 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop Equipment Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×46 Contractor Shop Equipment Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop Equipment Bay also viewed:

🏡 30×46

Triple-Wide Garage

30×46 triple-wide garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Triple-Wide Garage →
🏡 30×46

RV Garage with Workshop Bay

30×46 rv garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 30×46

Tradesperson Service Bay

30×46 tradesperson service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Service Bay →
🌾 30×46

Equipment & Hay Storage

30×46 equipment & hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Storage →
🎯 30×46

Man Cave / She Shed Hybrid

30×46 man cave / she shed hybrid configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed Hybrid →
🏢 30×46

Auto Repair Shop

30×46 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 30×46

Horse Barn with Tack Room

30×46 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🏭 30×46

Fabrication or Welding Shop

30×46 fabrication or welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication or Welding Shop →
🏡 30×46

Barndominium Shell

30×46 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 30×46

Mini-Storage / Multi-Bay Unit

30×46 mini-storage / multi-bay unit configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage / Multi-Bay Unit →
🎯 30×46

Boat & Toy Storage

30×46 boat & toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Toy Storage →
🏛️ 30×46

Church or Community Storage

30×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$27,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop Equipment Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay cost?

A 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay from Steel and Stud starts at $21,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $456/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor shop equipment bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay?

Almost always for 1,380+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop equipment bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $456/month on a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay.

What warranty comes with the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×46 contractor shop equipment bay typically adds $11,040–$16,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop Equipment Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with three open vehicle bays sheltering trucks and a sports car lakeside

24×60 Home Gym & Indoor Court

1,440 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×60 steel building delivers 1,440 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court | Steel and Stud — From $35,050
12
24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$39,950$35,050SAVE $4,900
or $730/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×60Home Gym Indoor Court

24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud puts 1,440 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Indoor Court·Size24×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,050$39,950Save $4,900
or as low as $730/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×60
24×60
this size
$35,050
24×65
longer
$38,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,440 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,440 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X60-HOME-GYM-INDOOR-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

24 feet wide × 60 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud puts 1,440 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane24′ × 60′ · 1,440 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~32 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Indoor Court.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,440 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Indoor Court spec sheet.

Width24'
Length60' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,440 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Indoor Court.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym indoor court
Everyday home gym indoor court
1,440 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym indoor court.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym indoor court + seasonal storage
home gym indoor court + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court — what makes it different.

1,440sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$730/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×60 home gym indoor court is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $730/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×60?

1,440 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 60′ footprint with 1,440 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,520–$17,280 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Indoor Court shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Indoor Court also viewed:

🏡 24×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

24×60 four-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 24×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

24×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →
🌾 24×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

24×60 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏡 24×60

Barndominium Shell

24×60 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 24×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

24×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →
🌾 24×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

24×60 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🎯 24×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

24×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →
🏭 24×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

24×60 light manufacturing bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →
🏢 24×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

24×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →
🏛️ 24×60

Church or Community Hall

24×60 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$32,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
🏡 24×60

Detached Shop with Loft

24×60 detached shop with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop with Loft →
🌾 24×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

24×60 livestock loafing shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Indoor Court questions, answered.

How much does a 24×60 home gym indoor court cost?

A 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud starts at $35,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $730/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×60 home gym indoor court price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym indoor court ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×60 home gym indoor court?

Almost always for 1,440+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym indoor court different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×60 home gym indoor court need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×60 home gym indoor court delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×60 home gym indoor court without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $730/month on a 24×60 home gym indoor court.

What warranty comes with the 24×60 home gym indoor court?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×60 home gym indoor court in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×60 home gym indoor court add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×60 home gym indoor court typically adds $11,520–$17,280 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Indoor Court quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$35,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal carport with three open vehicle bays sheltering trucks and a sports car lakeside

24×60 Home Gym & Indoor Court

1,440 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 60′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×60 steel building delivers 1,440 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court | Steel and Stud — From $35,050
12
24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$39,950$35,050SAVE $4,900
or $730/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×60Home Gym Indoor Court

24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud puts 1,440 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Home Gym Indoor Court·Size24×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,050$39,950Save $4,900
or as low as $730/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×60
24×60
this size
$35,050
24×65
longer
$38,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,440 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,440 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X60-HOME-GYM-INDOOR-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

24 feet wide × 60 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. The 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud puts 1,440 sq ft to work.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane24′ × 60′ · 1,440 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~32 at once.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, gable vents.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym Indoor Court.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,440 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym Indoor Court spec sheet.

Width24'
Length60' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,440 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym Indoor Court.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym indoor court
Everyday home gym indoor court
1,440 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym indoor court.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym indoor court + seasonal storage
home gym indoor court + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court — what makes it different.

1,440sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$730/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×60 home gym indoor court is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $730/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×60?

1,440 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 60′ footprint with 1,440 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,520–$17,280 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym Indoor Court shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×60 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×60 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×60 Home Gym Indoor Court

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym Indoor Court also viewed:

🏡 24×60

Four-Car Detached Garage

24×60 four-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Four-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 24×60

RV + Boat Combo Cover

24×60 rv + boat combo cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV + Boat Combo Cover →
🌾 24×60

Horse Barn with Stalls

24×60 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏡 24×60

Barndominium Shell

24×60 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 24×60

Contractor Workshop & Storage

24×60 contractor workshop & storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Storage →
🌾 24×60

Hay & Equipment Barn

24×60 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🎯 24×60

Man Cave & Restoration Garage

24×60 man cave & restoration garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Restoration Garage →
🏭 24×60

Light Manufacturing Bay

24×60 light manufacturing bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Manufacturing Bay →
🏢 24×60

Self-Storage Tenant Bays

24×60 self-storage tenant bays configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$26,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Tenant Bays →
🏛️ 24×60

Church or Community Hall

24×60 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$32,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
🏡 24×60

Detached Shop with Loft

24×60 detached shop with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Shop with Loft →
🌾 24×60

Livestock Loafing Shed

24×60 livestock loafing shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Loafing Shed →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym Indoor Court questions, answered.

How much does a 24×60 home gym indoor court cost?

A 24×60 home gym indoor court from Steel and Stud starts at $35,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $730/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×60 home gym indoor court price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym indoor court ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×60 home gym indoor court?

Almost always for 1,440+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym indoor court different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×60 home gym indoor court need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×60 home gym indoor court delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×60 home gym indoor court without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $730/month on a 24×60 home gym indoor court.

What warranty comes with the 24×60 home gym indoor court?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×60 home gym indoor court in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×60 home gym indoor court add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×60 home gym indoor court typically adds $11,520–$17,280 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym Indoor Court quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$35,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

24×70 Contractor Yard Office + Storage

1,680 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×70 steel building delivers 1,680 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage | Steel and Stud — From $38,450
12
24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$43,850$38,450SAVE $5,400
or $801/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×70Contractor Yard Office Storage

24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Yard Office Storage·Size24×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$38,450$43,850Save $5,400
or as low as $801/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×70
24×70
this size
$38,450
24×75
longer
$41,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,680 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,680 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X70-CONTRACTOR-YARD-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

24 feet wide × 70 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE24′ × 70′ · 1,680 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 14 workstations + meeting space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Yard Office Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,680 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Yard Office Storage spec sheet.

Width24'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,680 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Yard Office Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor yard office storage
Everyday contractor yard office storage
1,680 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor yard office storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor yard office storage + seasonal storage
contractor yard office storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage — what makes it different.

1,680sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$801/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×70 contractor yard office storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $801/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×70?

1,680 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 70′ footprint with 1,680 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $13,440–$20,160 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Yard Office Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Yard Office Storage also viewed:

🏢 24×70

Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay

24×70 five-car garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 24×70

Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout

24×70 auto repair shop — 3-bay layout configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout →
🌾 24×70

Equipment Storage Barn

24×70 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 24×70

Fabrication Shop

24×70 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 24×70

Metal Barndominium Shell

24×70 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🎯 24×70

RV Garage with Living Quarters

24×70 rv garage with living quarters configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →
🏢 24×70

Fleet Garage for Contractors

24×70 fleet garage for contractors configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Contractors →
🌾 24×70

Horse Barn with Center Aisle

24×70 horse barn with center aisle configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Center Aisle →
🏭 24×70

Warehouse for Inventory Storage

24×70 warehouse for inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse for Inventory Storage →
🏢 24×70

Self-Storage Building

24×70 self-storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Building →
🎯 24×70

Indoor Sports & Training Facility

24×70 indoor sports & training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports & Training Facility →
🏛️ 24×70

Community Hall or Event Space

24×70 community hall or event space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community Hall or Event Space →
🏢 24×70

Office

24×70 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 24×70

RV Motorhome Storage

24×70 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 24×70

Hobby Space

24×70 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 24×70

4 Car Garage

24×70 4 car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 4 Car Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Yard Office Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage cost?

A 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud starts at $38,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $801/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×70 contractor yard office storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor yard office storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×70 contractor yard office storage?

Almost always for 1,680+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor yard office storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×70 contractor yard office storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×70 contractor yard office storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $801/month on a 24×70 contractor yard office storage.

What warranty comes with the 24×70 contractor yard office storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×70 contractor yard office storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×70 contractor yard office storage typically adds $13,440–$20,160 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Yard Office Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$38,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

24×70 Contractor Yard Office + Storage

1,680 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

24′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×70 steel building delivers 1,680 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage | Steel and Stud — From $38,450
12
24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$43,850$38,450SAVE $5,400
or $801/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×70Contractor Yard Office Storage

24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Contractor Yard Office Storage·Size24×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$38,450$43,850Save $5,400
or as low as $801/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×70
24×70
this size
$38,450
24×75
longer
$41,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,680 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,680 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X70-CONTRACTOR-YARD-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

24 feet wide × 70 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud puts 1,680 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE24′ × 70′ · 1,680 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 14 workstations + meeting space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Yard Office Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,680 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Yard Office Storage spec sheet.

Width24'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,680 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Yard Office Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor yard office storage
Everyday contractor yard office storage
1,680 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor yard office storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor yard office storage + seasonal storage
contractor yard office storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage — what makes it different.

1,680sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$801/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×70 contractor yard office storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $801/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×70?

1,680 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 70′ footprint with 1,680 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $13,440–$20,160 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Yard Office Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×70 Contractor Yard Office Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Yard Office Storage also viewed:

🏢 24×70

Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay

24×70 five-car garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Five-Car Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 24×70

Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout

24×70 auto repair shop — 3-bay layout configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop — 3-Bay Layout →
🌾 24×70

Equipment Storage Barn

24×70 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 24×70

Fabrication Shop

24×70 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 24×70

Metal Barndominium Shell

24×70 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🎯 24×70

RV Garage with Living Quarters

24×70 rv garage with living quarters configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Living Quarters →
🏢 24×70

Fleet Garage for Contractors

24×70 fleet garage for contractors configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Contractors →
🌾 24×70

Horse Barn with Center Aisle

24×70 horse barn with center aisle configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$28,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Center Aisle →
🏭 24×70

Warehouse for Inventory Storage

24×70 warehouse for inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse for Inventory Storage →
🏢 24×70

Self-Storage Building

24×70 self-storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$31,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Building →
🎯 24×70

Indoor Sports & Training Facility

24×70 indoor sports & training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports & Training Facility →
🏛️ 24×70

Community Hall or Event Space

24×70 community hall or event space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community Hall or Event Space →
🏢 24×70

Office

24×70 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 24×70

RV Motorhome Storage

24×70 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 24×70

Hobby Space

24×70 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$40,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 24×70

4 Car Garage

24×70 4 car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 4 Car Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Yard Office Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage cost?

A 24×70 contractor yard office storage from Steel and Stud starts at $38,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $801/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×70 contractor yard office storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor yard office storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×70 contractor yard office storage?

Almost always for 1,680+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor yard office storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×70 contractor yard office storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×70 contractor yard office storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $801/month on a 24×70 contractor yard office storage.

What warranty comes with the 24×70 contractor yard office storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×70 contractor yard office storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×70 contractor yard office storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×70 contractor yard office storage typically adds $13,440–$20,160 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Yard Office Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$38,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Desert tan metal building garage apartment with brown overhead door and cactus landscaping

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell

1,120 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

28′ x 40′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×40 steel building delivers 1,120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
28×40×12 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $23,450
12
28×40 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,750$23,450SAVE $3,300
or $489/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings28×40Barndominium Shell

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size28×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,450$26,750Save $3,300
or as low as $489/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×40
28×40
this size
$23,450
32×40
wider
$26,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,120 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,120 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X40-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

28 feet wide × 40 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. The 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

Living + kitchenBedroom + bathUtility / mech corner28′ × 40′ · 1,120 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×40 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×40×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width28'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$489/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×40×12 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $489/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×40×12?

1,120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 40′ footprint with 1,120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,960–$13,440 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×40×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 28×40×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×40×12 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×40×12 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 28×40×12

3-Car Garage with Workshop Corner

28×40×12 3-car garage with workshop corner configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 3-Car Garage with Workshop Corner →
🎯 28×40×12

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

28×40×12 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🏢 28×40×12

Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay

28×40×12 contractor workshop & equipment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay →
🌾 28×40×12

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

28×40×12 hay barn & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →
🏡 28×40×12

Garage with Loft Apartment

28×40×12 garage with loft apartment configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage with Loft Apartment →
🏢 28×40×12

Auto Repair Shop

28×40×12 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 28×40×12

Horse Barn with Tack Room

28×40×12 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🎯 28×40×12

Man Cave & Game Room

28×40×12 man cave & game room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Game Room →
🏭 28×40×12

Welding & Fabrication Shop

28×40×12 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
🏡 28×40×12

Detached Garage & She Shed Combo

28×40×12 detached garage & she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage & She Shed Combo →
🏢 28×40×12

Boat & Trailer Storage Building

28×40×12 boat & trailer storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell cost?

A 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $23,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $489/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×40×12 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×40×12 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×40×12 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×40×12 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $489/month on a 28×40×12 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 28×40×12 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×40×12 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×40×12 barndominium shell typically adds $8,960–$13,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Desert tan metal building garage apartment with brown overhead door and cactus landscaping

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell

1,120 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

28′ x 40′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 28×40 steel building delivers 1,120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
28×40×12 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $23,450
12
28×40 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,750$23,450SAVE $3,300
or $489/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings28×40Barndominium Shell

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

The 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size28×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,450$26,750Save $3,300
or as low as $489/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×40
28×40
this size
$23,450
32×40
wider
$26,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 1,120 sq ft enclosed
  • 1,120 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-28X40-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

28 feet wide × 40 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. The 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud puts 1,120 sq ft to work.

Living + kitchenBedroom + bathUtility / mech corner28′ × 40′ · 1,120 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×40 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 28×40×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width28'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×40×12 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$489/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×40×12 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $489/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 28×40×12?

1,120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 28′ × 40′ footprint with 1,120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,960–$13,440 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×40×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 28×40×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×40×12 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 28×40×12 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 28×40×12

3-Car Garage with Workshop Corner

28×40×12 3-car garage with workshop corner configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize 3-Car Garage with Workshop Corner →
🎯 28×40×12

RV Cover with Enclosed Storage

28×40×12 rv cover with enclosed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Enclosed Storage →
🏢 28×40×12

Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay

28×40×12 contractor workshop & equipment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop & Equipment Bay →
🌾 28×40×12

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

28×40×12 hay barn & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →
🏡 28×40×12

Garage with Loft Apartment

28×40×12 garage with loft apartment configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage with Loft Apartment →
🏢 28×40×12

Auto Repair Shop

28×40×12 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 28×40×12

Horse Barn with Tack Room

28×40×12 horse barn with tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Tack Room →
🎯 28×40×12

Man Cave & Game Room

28×40×12 man cave & game room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave & Game Room →
🏭 28×40×12

Welding & Fabrication Shop

28×40×12 welding & fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding & Fabrication Shop →
🏡 28×40×12

Detached Garage & She Shed Combo

28×40×12 detached garage & she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage & She Shed Combo →
🏢 28×40×12

Boat & Trailer Storage Building

28×40×12 boat & trailer storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell cost?

A 28×40×12 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $23,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $489/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×40×12 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×40×12 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 28×40×12 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 28×40×12 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $489/month on a 28×40×12 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 28×40×12 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 28×40×12 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 28×40×12 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×40×12 barndominium shell typically adds $8,960–$13,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal garage with roll-up door and walk-in entry on concrete pad at sunset

24×32 Two-Car Garage

768 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

24′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×32 steel building delivers 768 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×32 Two Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $11,350
12
24×32 Two Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×32Two Car Detached Garage

24×32 Two Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 768 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Two Car Detached Garage·Size24×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×32
24×32
this size
$11,350
24×35
longer
$12,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 768 sq ft enclosed
  • 768 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X32-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

24 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 768 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools24′ × 32′ · 768 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
768 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width24'
Length32' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space768 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two car detached garage
Everyday two car detached garage
768 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo car detached garage + seasonal storage
two car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×32 Two Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

768sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×32 two car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×32?

768 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 32′ footprint with 768 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,144–$9,216 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 24×32

Two-Car Garage

24×32 two-car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Garage →
🏡 24×32

Detached Workshop

24×32 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🎯 24×32

RV Cover with Storage

24×32 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 24×32

Equipment Shelter

24×32 equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shelter →
🏡 24×32

Garage + Workshop Combo

24×32 garage + workshop combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage + Workshop Combo →
🌾 24×32

Horse Barn

24×32 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🏢 24×32

Contractor Shop

24×32 contractor shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop →
🏡 24×32

Man Cave / She Shed

24×32 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🎯 24×32

Boat & Toy Storage

24×32 boat & toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Toy Storage →
🏡 24×32

Detached Garage with Loft

24×32 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🌾 24×32

Hay & Feed Storage

24×32 hay & feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Storage →
🏢 24×32

Carport + Office

24×32 carport + office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport + Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 24×32 two car detached garage cost?

A 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×32 two car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×32 two car detached garage?

Almost always for 768+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×32 two car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×32 two car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×32 two car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 24×32 two car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 24×32 two car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×32 two car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×32 two car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×32 two car detached garage typically adds $6,144–$9,216 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal garage with roll-up door and walk-in entry on concrete pad at sunset

24×32 Two-Car Garage

768 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

24′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 24×32 steel building delivers 768 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
24×32 Two Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $11,350
12
24×32 Two Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600
or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings24×32Two Car Detached Garage

24×32 Two Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

The 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 768 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Two Car Detached Garage·Size24×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600
or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 24×32
24×32
this size
$11,350
24×35
longer
$12,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 768 sq ft enclosed
  • 768 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-24X32-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

24 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. The 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud puts 768 sq ft to work.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools24′ × 32′ · 768 sq ft · two-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lift-height clearance, air compressor, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
768 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 24×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width24'
Length32' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space768 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two car detached garage
Everyday two car detached garage
768 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo car detached garage + seasonal storage
two car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

24×32 Two Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

768sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$236/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 24×32 two car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 24×32?

768 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 24′ × 32′ footprint with 768 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $6,144–$9,216 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 24×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 24×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 24×32 Two Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 24×32

Two-Car Garage

24×32 two-car garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Garage →
🏡 24×32

Detached Workshop

24×32 detached workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Workshop →
🎯 24×32

RV Cover with Storage

24×32 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 24×32

Equipment Shelter

24×32 equipment shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shelter →
🏡 24×32

Garage + Workshop Combo

24×32 garage + workshop combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garage + Workshop Combo →
🌾 24×32

Horse Barn

24×32 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🏢 24×32

Contractor Shop

24×32 contractor shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Shop →
🏡 24×32

Man Cave / She Shed

24×32 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🎯 24×32

Boat & Toy Storage

24×32 boat & toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Toy Storage →
🏡 24×32

Detached Garage with Loft

24×32 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🌾 24×32

Hay & Feed Storage

24×32 hay & feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Storage →
🏢 24×32

Carport + Office

24×32 carport + office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Carport + Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 24×32 two car detached garage cost?

A 24×32 two car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 24×32 two car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 24×32 two car detached garage?

Almost always for 768+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 24×32 two car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 24×32 two car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 24×32 two car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $236/month on a 24×32 two car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 24×32 two car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 24×32 two car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 24×32 two car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 24×32 two car detached garage typically adds $6,144–$9,216 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal garage auto shop with roll-up door open showing a car on a lift

18×28 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

504 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 28′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×28 steel building delivers 504 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $11,550
12
18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,150$11,550SAVE $1,600
or $241/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×28Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom

18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×28·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,550$13,150Save $1,600
or as low as $241/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×28
18×28
this size
$11,550
18×35
longer
$14,400
24×28
wider
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 504 sq ft enclosed
  • 504 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X28-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boutique storefront.

18 feet wide × 28 feet long. Glass storefront on short wall. The 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

Display windowSales floorStock + checkout18′ × 28′ · 504 sq ft · boutique storefront

Display window · Sales floor · Stock + checkout

Display window at the front, sales floor in the middle, stock + checkout at the rear. Capacity: compact retail (~378 sf selling).

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: signage band, fitting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
504 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×28 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18'
Length28' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space504 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car motorcycle showroom
504 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom — what makes it different.

504sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$241/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $241/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×28?

504 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 28′ footprint with 504 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,032–$6,048 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×28 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×28 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×28

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×28 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×28

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×28 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×28

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×28 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×28

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×28 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×28

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×28 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🌾 18×28

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×28 tractor shed with implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →
🏢 18×28

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×28 small business inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →
🏢 18×28

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×28 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×28

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×28 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×28

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×28 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×28

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×28 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $11,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $241/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud collector car motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 504+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $241/month on a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom typically adds $4,032–$6,048 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal garage auto shop with roll-up door open showing a car on a lift

18×28 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

504 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 28′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×28 steel building delivers 504 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $11,550
12
18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,150$11,550SAVE $1,600
or $241/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×28Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom

18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom, built for daily backyard use.

The 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

You're viewing:Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×28·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,550$13,150Save $1,600
or as low as $241/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×28
18×28
this size
$11,550
18×35
longer
$14,400
24×28
wider
$15,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Customizations selected:
Pricing varies by configuration, season, and installer — a specialist will send your complete itemized quote.
  • 504 sq ft enclosed
  • 504 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • Up to 180 mph wind rating
  • Up to 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X28-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
2,500+
Buildings Installed
🇺🇸
48
States Served
🚚
Free
Delivery + Install
🛡️
20-Year
Rust Warranty
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boutique storefront.

18 feet wide × 28 feet long. Glass storefront on short wall. The 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud puts 504 sq ft to work.

Display windowSales floorStock + checkout18′ × 28′ · 504 sq ft · boutique storefront

Display window · Sales floor · Stock + checkout

Display window at the front, sales floor in the middle, stock + checkout at the rear. Capacity: compact retail (~378 sf selling).

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: signage band, fitting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
504 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×28 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18'
Length28' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space504 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car motorcycle showroom
504 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add partitions or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom — what makes it different.

504sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$241/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $241/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×28?

504 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 28′ footprint with 504 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,032–$6,048 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×28 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×28 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×28 Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 2,500+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×28

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×28 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×28

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×28 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×28

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×28 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×28

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×28 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×28

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×28 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🌾 18×28

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×28 tractor shed with implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →
🏢 18×28

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×28 small business inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →
🏢 18×28

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×28 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×28

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×28 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×28

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×28 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×28

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×28 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $11,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $241/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud collector car motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 504+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $241/month on a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×28 collector car motorcycle showroom typically adds $4,032–$6,048 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install